hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% IEEEtran.cls 2007/03/05 version V1.7a hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% This is the official IEEE LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of hekeus@3: %% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and hekeus@3: %% conferences. hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% Support sites: hekeus@3: %% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ hekeus@3: %% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/ hekeus@3: %% and hekeus@3: %% http://www.ieee.org/ hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes hekeus@3: %% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version. hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% Contributors: hekeus@3: %% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993), hekeus@3: %% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996), hekeus@3: %% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2007) hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi, hekeus@3: %% Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter, hekeus@3: %% Juergen von Hagen hekeus@3: %% and hekeus@3: %% Copyright (c) 2001-2007 by Michael Shell hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.7): Michael Shell hekeus@3: %% See: hekeus@3: %% http://www.michaelshell.org/ hekeus@3: %% for current contact information. hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau hekeus@3: %% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command hekeus@3: %% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package. hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %%************************************************************************* hekeus@3: %% Legal Notice: hekeus@3: %% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or hekeus@3: %% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or hekeus@3: %% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! hekeus@3: %% User assumes all risk. hekeus@3: %% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for hekeus@3: %% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, hekeus@3: %% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse hekeus@3: %% of any information contained here. hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not hekeus@3: %% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) hekeus@3: %% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, hekeus@3: %% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included hekeus@3: %% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released hekeus@3: %% 2003/12/01 or later. hekeus@3: %% Retain all contribution notices and credits. hekeus@3: %% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** hekeus@3: %% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, hekeus@3: %% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an hekeus@3: %% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will hekeus@3: %% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA. hekeus@3: %% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version hekeus@3: %% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls". hekeus@3: %% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user, hekeus@3: %% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the hekeus@3: %% correct version information. hekeus@3: %% The changes should also be documented via source comments. hekeus@3: %%************************************************************************* hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % Available class options hekeus@3: % e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran} hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % *** choose only one from each category *** hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt hekeus@3: % Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt. hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca hekeus@3: % determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers, hekeus@3: % correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user hekeus@3: % should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like hekeus@3: % journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for hekeus@3: % anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is hekeus@3: % repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review hekeus@3: % papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will hekeus@3: % automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the hekeus@3: % cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are hekeus@3: % not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like hekeus@3: % peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted hekeus@3: % as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact hekeus@3: % information can be easily seen on the cover page. hekeus@3: % The default is journal. hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final hekeus@3: % determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for hekeus@3: % handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version. hekeus@3: % draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX hekeus@3: % packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows hekeus@3: % for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like hekeus@3: % draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot hekeus@3: % of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably hekeus@3: % also want to select onecolumn. hekeus@3: % The default is final. hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % letterpaper, a4paper hekeus@3: % determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in or 210mm X 297mm. CHANGING THE PAPER hekeus@3: % SIZE WILL NOT ALTER THE TYPESETTING OF THE DOCUMENT - ONLY THE MARGINS hekeus@3: % WILL BE AFFECTED. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will hekeus@3: % have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer hekeus@3: % bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top hekeus@3: % margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered. hekeus@3: % For final submission to IEEE, authors should use US letter (8.5 X 11in) hekeus@3: % paper. Note that authors should ensure that all post-processing hekeus@3: % (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper specificiation as the .tex document. hekeus@3: % Problems here are by far the number one reason for incorrect margins. hekeus@3: % IEEEtran will automatically set the default paper size under pdflatex hekeus@3: % (without requiring a change to pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more hekeus@3: % important to dvips users. Fix config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for hekeus@3: % dvips, or use the dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. See the hekeus@3: % testflow documentation hekeus@3: % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow hekeus@3: % for more details on dvips paper size configuration. hekeus@3: % The default is letterpaper. hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % oneside, twoside hekeus@3: % determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex) hekeus@3: % printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of hekeus@3: % the pages. hekeus@3: % The default is oneside. hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % onecolumn, twocolumn hekeus@3: % determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One hekeus@3: % column mode is usually used only with draft papers. hekeus@3: % The default is twocolumn. hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % compsoc hekeus@3: % Use the format of the IEEE Computer Society. hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % romanappendices hekeus@3: % Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls hekeus@3: % now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what hekeus@3: % v1.6b and earlier did. hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % captionsoff hekeus@3: % disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals hekeus@3: % request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages hekeus@3: % of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat hekeus@3: % package can be used with this class option to achieve this format. hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % nofonttune hekeus@3: % turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those hekeus@3: % not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned" hekeus@3: % their fonts. hekeus@3: % The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters. hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: %---------- hekeus@3: % Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted): hekeus@3: % \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch hekeus@3: % \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin hekeus@3: % \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin hekeus@3: % \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin hekeus@3: % \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % Available CLASSINFOs provided: hekeus@3: % \ifCLASSINFOpdf (TeX if conditional) hekeus@3: % \CLASSINFOpaperwidth (macro) hekeus@3: % \CLASSINFOpaperheight (macro) hekeus@3: % \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip (length) hekeus@3: % \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length) hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % Available CLASSOPTIONs provided: hekeus@3: % all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted, hekeus@3: % e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff hekeus@3: % point size options provided as a single macro: hekeus@3: % \CLASSOPTIONpt hekeus@3: % which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's hekeus@3: % normalsize point size. hekeus@3: % also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview hekeus@3: % and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2007/03/05 V1.7a by Michael Shell] hekeus@3: \typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.} hekeus@3: \typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/} hekeus@3: \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3 hekeus@3: % These values serve as a way a .tex file can hekeus@3: % determine if the new features are provided. hekeus@3: % The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from hekeus@3: % these values. i.e., V1.4 hekeus@3: % KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that- hekeus@3: % (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here) hekeus@3: \def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1} hekeus@3: \def\IEEEtransversionminor{7} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls hekeus@3: \newif\if@restonecol hekeus@3: \newif\if@titlepage hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % class option conditionals hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn \CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % class info conditionals hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output hekeus@3: \newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf \CLASSINFOpdffalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % IEEEtran class scratch pad registers hekeus@3: % dimen hekeus@3: \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA hekeus@3: \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB hekeus@3: % count hekeus@3: \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA hekeus@3: \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB hekeus@3: % token list hekeus@3: \newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs) hekeus@3: % as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some hekeus@3: % external packages hekeus@3: \def\@ptsize{0} hekeus@3: % LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}} hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}} hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}} hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{11in}% hekeus@3: \setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse hekeus@3: \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}% hekeus@3: \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}% hekeus@3: \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}% hekeus@3: \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue hekeus@3: \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}% hekeus@3: \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}% hekeus@3: \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse hekeus@3: \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse} hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue hekeus@3: \CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse} hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages hekeus@3: % will go into draft mode. hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue hekeus@3: \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} hekeus@3: % draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages hekeus@3: % used by the document. hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue hekeus@3: \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} hekeus@3: % draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer. hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue hekeus@3: \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue} hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse hekeus@3: \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse hekeus@3: \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse hekeus@3: \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse hekeus@3: \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse hekeus@3: \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue hekeus@3: \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal hekeus@3: \ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal} hekeus@3: % overrride these defaults per user requests hekeus@3: \ProcessOptions hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % Computer Society conditional execution command hekeus@3: \long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} hekeus@3: % inverse hekeus@3: \long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} hekeus@3: % compsoc conference hekeus@3: \long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax} hekeus@3: % compsoc not conference hekeus@3: \long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times. hekeus@3: % These three commands make up the entire times.sty package. hekeus@3: \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv} hekeus@3: \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm} hekeus@3: \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsoconly{\typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font, hekeus@3: % not Times Roman. hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ppl}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % enable Times/Palatino main text font hekeus@3: \normalfont\selectfont hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 conference notice message hook hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}% hekeus@3: \typeout{** Conference Paper **}% hekeus@3: \typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}% hekeus@3: \typeout{}% hekeus@3: \typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}% hekeus@3: \typeout{ of your paper;}% hekeus@3: \typeout{}% hekeus@3: \typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}% hekeus@3: \typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}% hekeus@3: \typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}% hekeus@3: \typeout{}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % we can send console reminder messages to the user here hekeus@3: \AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else% hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else% hekeus@3: \typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 improved paper size setting code. hekeus@3: % Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that hekeus@3: % of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered, hekeus@3: % even if only effect is to set them to \relax. hekeus@3: % if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special hekeus@3: {\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{% hekeus@3: % pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax hekeus@3: % check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput hekeus@3: % under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput. hekeus@3: \@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth hekeus@3: \global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}% hekeus@3: % if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special hekeus@3: \ifcase\pdfoutput hekeus@3: \AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}% hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: % we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag hekeus@3: \global\CLASSINFOpdftrue hekeus@3: \fi}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % let the user know the selected papersize hekeus@3: \typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space hekeus@3: (\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \ifCLASSINFOpdf hekeus@3: \typeout{-- Using PDF output.} hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \typeout{-- Using DVI output.} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{} hekeus@3: % automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{}, hekeus@3: % \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc. hekeus@3: % However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as hekeus@3: % well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues hekeus@3: % that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}. hekeus@3: % We'll leave this as an open future suggestion. hekeus@3: %\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}} hekeus@3: %\def\@journal{} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % pointsize values hekeus@3: % used with ifx to determine the document's normal size hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEptsizenine{9} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEptsizeten{10} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed) hekeus@3: % V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and hekeus@3: % revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems hekeus@3: % on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want hekeus@3: % normalsize #lines/column baselineskip (aka leading) hekeus@3: % 9pt 63 11.0476pt (truncated down) hekeus@3: % 10pt 58 12pt (exact) hekeus@3: % 11pt 52 13.3846pt (truncated down) hekeus@3: % 12pt 50 13.92pt (exact) hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size hekeus@3: % in case baselinestretch ever changes. hekeus@3: % this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink hekeus@3: \newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip hekeus@3: \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine hekeus@3: \typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.} hekeus@3: \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}% hekeus@3: \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}% hekeus@3: \normalsize hekeus@3: \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt% hekeus@3: \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% hekeus@3: \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt% hekeus@3: \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt hekeus@3: \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}} hekeus@3: \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} hekeus@3: \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} hekeus@3: \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} hekeus@3: % sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt hekeus@3: \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}} hekeus@3: \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}} hekeus@3: \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}} hekeus@3: \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}} hekeus@3: \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}} hekeus@3: \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % Check if we have selected 10 points hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten hekeus@3: \typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.} hekeus@3: \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}}% hekeus@3: \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt}% hekeus@3: \normalsize hekeus@3: \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt% hekeus@3: \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% hekeus@3: \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus4pt% hekeus@3: \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt hekeus@3: \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}} hekeus@3: \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} hekeus@3: \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} hekeus@3: \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} hekeus@3: % sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt hekeus@3: \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11}{13.4pt}} hekeus@3: \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} hekeus@3: \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} hekeus@3: \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} hekeus@3: \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} hekeus@3: \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % Check if we have selected 11 points hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven hekeus@3: \typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.} hekeus@3: \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}% hekeus@3: \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}% hekeus@3: \normalsize hekeus@3: \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt% hekeus@3: \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% hekeus@3: \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus5pt% hekeus@3: \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt hekeus@3: \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} hekeus@3: \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} hekeus@3: \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} hekeus@3: \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} hekeus@3: % sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt hekeus@3: \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}} hekeus@3: \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} hekeus@3: \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} hekeus@3: \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} hekeus@3: \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} hekeus@3: \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % Check if we have selected 12 points hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve hekeus@3: \typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.} hekeus@3: \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}% hekeus@3: \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}% hekeus@3: \normalsize hekeus@3: \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt% hekeus@3: \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% hekeus@3: \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus6pt% hekeus@3: \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt hekeus@3: \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} hekeus@3: \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} hekeus@3: \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} hekeus@3: \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} hekeus@3: % sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt hekeus@3: \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}} hekeus@3: \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}} hekeus@3: \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}} hekeus@3: \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}} hekeus@3: \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}} hekeus@3: \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for hekeus@3: % 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead) increase the substitution hekeus@3: % tolerance to turn off this warning hekeus@3: \def\fontsubfuzz{.9pt} hekeus@3: % However, the default (and correct) Times font will scale exactly as needed. hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with hekeus@3: % technote hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else% hekeus@3: \typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 hekeus@3: % Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with hekeus@3: % OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use hekeus@3: % available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family hekeus@3: \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode hekeus@3: \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else hekeus@3: \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else hekeus@3: \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else hekeus@3: \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else hekeus@3: \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else hekeus@3: \kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % set the default \baselinestretch hekeus@3: \def\baselinestretch{1} hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls hekeus@3: \def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override hekeus@3: \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to hekeus@3: \baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % store the normalsize baselineskip hekeus@3: \newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip hekeus@3: \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax hekeus@3: % and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip hekeus@3: % we could save a register by giving the user access to hekeus@3: % \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect hekeus@3: % its read only internal status hekeus@3: \newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip hekeus@3: \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax hekeus@3: % store the nominal value of jot hekeus@3: \newdimen\IEEEnormaljot hekeus@3: \IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % set \jot hekeus@3: \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing hekeus@3: % The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a hekeus@3: % nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em) hekeus@3: % a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%. hekeus@3: % For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of: hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % However, IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need hekeus@3: % for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, IEEE hekeus@3: % tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words. hekeus@3: % IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be: hekeus@3: % 35% nominal hekeus@3: % 23% minimum hekeus@3: % 50% maximum hekeus@3: % (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.) hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % for bold text, IEEE increases the spacing a little more: hekeus@3: % 37.5% nominal hekeus@3: % 23% minimum hekeus@3: % 55% maximum hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use hekeus@3: % for medium (normal weight) hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % for bold hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX: hekeus@3: % \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space hekeus@3: % \fontdimen3 = interword stretch hekeus@3: % \fontdimen4 = interword shrink hekeus@3: % since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands hekeus@3: % in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes hekeus@3: \def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{% hekeus@3: \setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead. hekeus@3: \setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% hekeus@3: \fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax hekeus@3: \addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% hekeus@3: \fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax hekeus@3: \setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% hekeus@3: \addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% hekeus@3: \fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % revise the interword spacing for each font weight hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% hekeus@3: \mdseries hekeus@3: \@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}% hekeus@3: \bfseries hekeus@3: \@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}% hekeus@3: }} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % revise the interword spacing for each font shape hekeus@3: % \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are hekeus@3: % already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what IEEE uses) so we hekeus@3: % won't alter these either. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% hekeus@3: \normalfont hekeus@3: \@@IEEEsetfontdimens hekeus@3: \normalfont\itshape hekeus@3: \@@IEEEsetfontdimens hekeus@3: }} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape hekeus@3: % and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a hekeus@3: % fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily hekeus@3: \tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens hekeus@3: \scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens hekeus@3: \footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens hekeus@3: \small\@IEEEsetfontdimens hekeus@3: \normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens hekeus@3: \sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens hekeus@3: \large\@IEEEsetfontdimens hekeus@3: \LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens hekeus@3: \huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens hekeus@3: \Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing hekeus@3: % now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make hekeus@3: % sure all the default fonts are loaded hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else hekeus@3: \@IEEEtunefonts hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts hekeus@3: \AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.6 hekeus@3: % LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations hekeus@3: % So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise hekeus@3: % the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox hekeus@3: % warning. The author may still have to tweak things, hekeus@3: % but the appearance will be much better "right out hekeus@3: % of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior. hekeus@3: % TeX default is 50 hekeus@3: \hyphenpenalty=750 hekeus@3: % If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better. hekeus@3: % The TeX default is 1000 hekeus@3: \hbadness=1350 hekeus@3: % IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation hekeus@3: \frenchspacing hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks hekeus@3: \binoppenalty=1000 % default 700 hekeus@3: \relpenalty=800 % default 500 hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % margin note stuff hekeus@3: \marginparsep 10pt hekeus@3: \marginparwidth 20pt hekeus@3: \marginparpush 25pt hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch hekeus@3: \lineskip 0pt hekeus@3: \normallineskip 0pt hekeus@3: \lineskiplimit 0pt hekeus@3: \normallineskiplimit 0pt hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the hekeus@3: % footline hekeus@3: \footskip 0.4in hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % normally zero, should be relative to font height. hekeus@3: % put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes) hekeus@3: \parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \parindent 1.0em hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \topmargin -49.0pt hekeus@3: \headheight 12pt hekeus@3: \headsep 0.25in hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % use the normal font baselineskip hekeus@3: % so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch hekeus@3: \topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip hekeus@3: \textheight 58pc % 9.63in, 696pt hekeus@3: % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. hekeus@3: % The normal baselineskip for each document point size is used hekeus@3: % to determine these values. hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=63\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 63 lines/page hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=52\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 52 lines/page hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \columnsep 1pc hekeus@3: \textwidth 43pc % 2 x 21pc + 1pc = 43pc hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % the default side margins are equal hekeus@3: \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper hekeus@3: \oddsidemargin 14.32mm hekeus@3: \evensidemargin 14.32mm hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \oddsidemargin 0.680in hekeus@3: \evensidemargin 0.680in hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset hekeus@3: \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} hekeus@3: \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % adjust margins for conference mode hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference hekeus@3: \topmargin -0.25in hekeus@3: % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers hekeus@3: \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} hekeus@3: \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} hekeus@3: \textheight 9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt) hekeus@3: % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=61\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 61 lines/page hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=56\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 56 lines/page hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % compsoc conference hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference hekeus@3: % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep hekeus@3: \columnsep 0.375in hekeus@3: % compsoc conferences want 1in top margin, 1.125in bottom margin hekeus@3: \topmargin 0in hekeus@3: \addtolength{\topmargin}{-6pt}% we tweak this a tad to better comply with top of line stuff hekeus@3: % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers hekeus@3: \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} hekeus@3: \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} hekeus@3: \textheight 8.875in % (641.39625pt) hekeus@3: % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=53\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 53 lines/page hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=46\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 46 lines/page hekeus@3: \textwidth 6.5in hekeus@3: % the default side margins are equal hekeus@3: \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper hekeus@3: \oddsidemargin 22.45mm hekeus@3: \evensidemargin 22.45mm hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \oddsidemargin 1in hekeus@3: \evensidemargin 1in hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset hekeus@3: \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} hekeus@3: \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} hekeus@3: \fi\fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % draft mode settings override that of all other modes hekeus@3: % provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra hekeus@3: % space between the lines for editor's comments hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls hekeus@3: % want 1in from top of paper to text hekeus@3: \setlength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}% hekeus@3: \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}% hekeus@3: % we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type hekeus@3: \oddsidemargin 0in hekeus@3: \evensidemargin 0in hekeus@3: % set the text width hekeus@3: \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}% hekeus@3: \addtolength{\textwidth}{-2.0in}% hekeus@3: \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}% hekeus@3: \addtolength{\textheight}{-2.0in}% hekeus@3: % digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines. hekeus@3: % this may cause the bottom margin to be off a tad hekeus@3: \addtolength{\textheight}{-1\topskip}% hekeus@3: \divide\textheight by \baselineskip% hekeus@3: \multiply\textheight by \baselineskip% hekeus@3: \addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin hekeus@3: % if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner. hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined hekeus@3: \edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: % if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer. hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined hekeus@3: \edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside hekeus@3: \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} hekeus@3: \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} hekeus@3: \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth} hekeus@3: \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} hekeus@3: \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} hekeus@3: \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and hekeus@3: outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin hekeus@3: % if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined hekeus@3: \edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: % if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined hekeus@3: \edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \setlength{\topmargin}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} hekeus@3: \addtolength{\topmargin}{-1in} hekeus@3: \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} hekeus@3: \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} hekeus@3: \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight} hekeus@3: \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} hekeus@3: \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} hekeus@3: % in the default format we use the normal baselineskip as topskip hekeus@3: % we only need 0.7 of this to clear typical top text and we need hekeus@3: % an extra 0.3 spacing at the bottom for descenders. This will hekeus@3: % correct for both. hekeus@3: \addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.3\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} hekeus@3: \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and hekeus@3: bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % LIST SPACING CONTROLS hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing hekeus@3: % above and below \trivlist hekeus@3: % Both \list and IED lists override this. hekeus@3: % However, \trivlist will use this as will most hekeus@3: % things built from \trivlist like the \center hekeus@3: % environment. hekeus@3: \topsep 0.5\baselineskip hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded hekeus@3: % or followed by blank lines. IEEE does not increase hekeus@3: % spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero. hekeus@3: % \z@ is the same as zero, but faster. hekeus@3: \partopsep \z@ hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists. hekeus@3: % IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs hekeus@3: % so this is also zero. hekeus@3: % With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to hekeus@3: % this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists). hekeus@3: \parsep \z@ hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % Controls the extra spacing between list items. hekeus@3: % IEEE does not put extra spacing between items. hekeus@3: % With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect hekeus@3: % lists (but not IED lists). hekeus@3: \itemsep \z@ hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list hekeus@3: % item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter hekeus@3: % it, you have to do so when you call the \list. hekeus@3: % However, IEEE uses this for the theorem environment hekeus@3: % There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below hekeus@3: \itemindent -1em hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to hekeus@3: % the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list. hekeus@3: % Hence this statement does nothing for lists. hekeus@3: % But, quote and verse do use it for indention. hekeus@3: \leftmargin 2em hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list hekeus@3: % will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and hekeus@3: % description (IED) could care less about what these are as they hekeus@3: % all are overridden. hekeus@3: \leftmargini 2em hekeus@3: %\itemindent 2em % Alternative values: sometimes used. hekeus@3: %\leftmargini 0em hekeus@3: \leftmarginii 1em hekeus@3: \leftmarginiii 1.5em hekeus@3: \leftmarginiv 1.5em hekeus@3: \leftmarginv 1.0em hekeus@3: \leftmarginvi 1.0em hekeus@3: \labelsep 0.5em hekeus@3: \labelwidth \z@ hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained. hekeus@3: % However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the hekeus@3: % @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the hekeus@3: % appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called). hekeus@3: % \topsep is now 2pt as IEEE puts a little extra space around hekeus@3: % lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list. hekeus@3: % Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in hekeus@3: % the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes hekeus@3: % of these values DO affect \list hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt} hekeus@3: \let\@listI\@listi hekeus@3: \def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii% hekeus@3: \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} hekeus@3: \def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii% hekeus@3: \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} hekeus@3: \def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv% hekeus@3: \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} hekeus@3: \def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv% hekeus@3: \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} hekeus@3: \def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi% hekeus@3: \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % IEEE uses 5) not 5. hekeus@3: \def\labelenumi{\theenumi)} \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % IEEE uses a) not (a) hekeus@3: \def\labelenumii{\theenumii)} \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % IEEE uses iii) not iii. hekeus@3: \def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % IEEE uses A) not A. hekeus@3: \def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)} \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % exactly the same as in article.cls hekeus@3: \def\p@enumii{\theenumi} hekeus@3: \def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)} hekeus@3: \def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % itemized list label styles hekeus@3: \def\labelitemi{$\scriptstyle\bullet$} hekeus@3: \def\labelitemii{\textbf{--}} hekeus@3: \def\labelitemiii{$\ast$} hekeus@3: \def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS **** hekeus@3: % Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls hekeus@3: % *************************** hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % IEEE seems to use at least two different values by hekeus@3: % which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right hekeus@3: % For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal hekeus@3: % on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use hekeus@3: % an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications hekeus@3: % they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent. hekeus@3: % We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose hekeus@3: % which one you like in your document using a command such as: hekeus@3: % setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB} hekeus@3: \newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA hekeus@3: \IEEEilabelindentA \parindent hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB hekeus@3: \IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent hekeus@3: % However, we'll default to using \parindent hekeus@3: % which makes more sense to me hekeus@3: \newdimen\IEEEilabelindent hekeus@3: \IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels hekeus@3: % are indented to the right. hekeus@3: % Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention hekeus@3: \newdimen\IEEEelabelindent hekeus@3: \IEEEelabelindent \parindent hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % This controls the default amount the description list labels hekeus@3: % are indented to the right. hekeus@3: % Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention hekeus@3: \newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent hekeus@3: \IEEEdlabelindent \parindent hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % This is the value actually used within the IED lists. hekeus@3: % The IED environments automatically set its value to hekeus@3: % one of the three values above, so global changes do hekeus@3: % not have any effect hekeus@3: \newdimen\IEEElabelindent hekeus@3: \IEEElabelindent \parindent hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % The actual amount labels will be indented is hekeus@3: % \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below hekeus@3: % corresponding to the level of nesting depth hekeus@3: % This provides a means by which the user can hekeus@3: % alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper hekeus@3: % levels hekeus@3: % There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE" hekeus@3: % values. What IEEE actually does may depend on the specific hekeus@3: % circumstances. hekeus@3: % The first list level almost always has full indention. hekeus@3: % The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation hekeus@3: % Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing hekeus@3: % that they don't use any indentation. hekeus@3: \def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0} % almost always one hekeus@3: \def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases hekeus@3: \def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0? hekeus@3: \def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0} hekeus@3: \def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0} hekeus@3: \def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % value actually used within IED lists, it is auto hekeus@3: % set to one of the 6 values above hekeus@3: % global changes here have no effect hekeus@3: \def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED hekeus@3: % list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for hekeus@3: % the labels. hekeus@3: \newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep hekeus@3: \IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED hekeus@3: % list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for hekeus@3: % the labels (nomenclature lists). IEEE usually increases the hekeus@3: % spacing in these cases hekeus@3: \newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep hekeus@3: \IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % This controls the extra vertical separation put above and hekeus@3: % below each IED list. IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing hekeus@3: % around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable. hekeus@3: \newskip\IEEEiedtopsep hekeus@3: \IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % This command is executed within each IED list environment hekeus@3: % at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the hekeus@3: % parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing hekeus@3: % global parameters that affect things other than lists. hekeus@3: % i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}} hekeus@3: % will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until hekeus@3: % \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined. hekeus@3: \def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based hekeus@3: % on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent hekeus@3: % Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label} hekeus@3: % output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively: hekeus@3: % \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep hekeus@3: % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % hekeus@3: \def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}% hekeus@3: \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% hekeus@3: \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the hekeus@3: % width of the given text. It is the same as hekeus@3: % \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text} hekeus@3: % and useful as a shorter alternative. hekeus@3: % Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width hekeus@3: % of the longest label in the list hekeus@3: \def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % When this command is executed, IED lists will use the hekeus@3: % IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal hekeus@3: % spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via hekeus@3: % the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list hekeus@3: % environments. hekeus@3: \def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically hekeus@3: % calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep hekeus@3: % Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin hekeus@3: % This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse) hekeus@3: % via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list hekeus@3: % environments to have an effect. hekeus@3: \newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin hekeus@3: \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by hekeus@3: % the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level. hekeus@3: % This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option hekeus@3: % of the IED list environments to have an effect. hekeus@3: \newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor hekeus@3: \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % internal variable to indicate type of IED label hekeus@3: % justification hekeus@3: % 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % commands to allow the user to control IED hekeus@3: % label justifications. Use these commands within hekeus@3: % the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl hekeus@3: % Note that changing the normal list justifications hekeus@3: % is nonstandard and IEEE may not like it if you do so! hekeus@3: % I include these commands as they may be helpful to hekeus@3: % those who are using these enhanced list controls for hekeus@3: % other non-IEEE related LaTeX work. hekeus@3: % itemize and enumerate automatically default to right hekeus@3: % justification, description defaults to left. hekeus@3: \def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left hekeus@3: \def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center hekeus@3: \def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies hekeus@3: % this allows us to set all the list parameters within hekeus@3: % the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list) hekeus@3: % from overriding any of our parameters hekeus@3: % V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers hekeus@3: % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % Note controlled spacing here hekeus@3: \def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax% hekeus@3: \labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax% hekeus@3: \labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax% hekeus@3: \leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax% hekeus@3: \partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax% hekeus@3: \parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax% hekeus@3: \itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax% hekeus@3: \rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax% hekeus@3: \listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax% hekeus@3: \itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments hekeus@3: % note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description hekeus@3: % which must be created by the base classes hekeus@3: % save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate hekeus@3: \let\LaTeXitemize\itemize hekeus@3: \let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize hekeus@3: \let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate hekeus@3: \let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls hekeus@3: \newenvironment{LaTeXdescription} hekeus@3: {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin hekeus@3: \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}} hekeus@3: {\endlist} hekeus@3: \newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep hekeus@3: \normalfont\bfseries #1} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % override LaTeX's default IED lists hekeus@3: \def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize} hekeus@3: \def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize} hekeus@3: \def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} hekeus@3: \def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} hekeus@3: \def\description{\@IEEEdescription} hekeus@3: \def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that hekeus@3: % override itemize, enumerate, or description hekeus@3: \def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize} hekeus@3: \def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize} hekeus@3: \def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} hekeus@3: \def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} hekeus@3: \def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription} hekeus@3: \def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal hekeus@3: % commands so they are protected against redefinition hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}} hekeus@3: \def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist} hekeus@3: \def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist} hekeus@3: \def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS hekeus@3: % AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS hekeus@3: % IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001 hekeus@3: % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{% hekeus@3: \ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% hekeus@3: \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% hekeus@3: \advance\@itemdepth\@ne% hekeus@3: \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}% hekeus@3: % get the labelindentfactor for this level hekeus@3: \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be hekeus@3: \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% hekeus@3: \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default hekeus@3: % set other defaults hekeus@3: \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% hekeus@3: \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% hekeus@3: \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% hekeus@3: \IEEElabelindent\IEEEilabelindent% hekeus@3: \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% hekeus@3: \partopsep 0ex% hekeus@3: \parsep 0ex% hekeus@3: \itemsep 0ex% hekeus@3: \rightmargin 0em% hekeus@3: \listparindent 0em% hekeus@3: \itemindent 0em% hekeus@3: % calculate the label width hekeus@3: % the user can override this later if hekeus@3: % they specified a \labelwidth hekeus@3: \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters hekeus@3: \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{% hekeus@3: \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes hekeus@3: % to our globals hekeus@3: \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel hekeus@3: \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters hekeus@3: #1\relax% hekeus@3: % If the user has requested not to use the hekeus@3: % labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent hekeus@3: \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% hekeus@3: \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\labelindent% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: % Unless the user has requested otherwise, hekeus@3: % calculate our left margin based hekeus@3: % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and hekeus@3: % \labelsep hekeus@3: \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% hekeus@3: \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}% hekeus@3: \fi}\fi\fi}% hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS hekeus@3: % AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS hekeus@3: % IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001 hekeus@3: % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{% hekeus@3: \ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% hekeus@3: \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% hekeus@3: \advance\@enumdepth\@ne% hekeus@3: \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}% hekeus@3: % get the labelindentfactor for this level hekeus@3: \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be hekeus@3: \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% hekeus@3: \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default hekeus@3: % set other defaults hekeus@3: \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% hekeus@3: \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% hekeus@3: \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% hekeus@3: \IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent% hekeus@3: \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% hekeus@3: \partopsep 0ex% hekeus@3: \parsep 0ex% hekeus@3: \itemsep 0ex% hekeus@3: \rightmargin 0em% hekeus@3: \listparindent 0em% hekeus@3: \itemindent 0em% hekeus@3: % calculate the label width hekeus@3: % We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using hekeus@3: % normalfont 1) to 9) hekeus@3: % The user can override this later hekeus@3: \settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters hekeus@3: \list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}% hekeus@3: \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes hekeus@3: % to our globals hekeus@3: \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel hekeus@3: \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters hekeus@3: #1\relax% hekeus@3: % If the user has requested not to use the hekeus@3: % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent hekeus@3: \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% hekeus@3: \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: % Unless the user has requested otherwise, hekeus@3: % calculate our left margin based hekeus@3: % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and hekeus@3: % \labelsep hekeus@3: \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% hekeus@3: \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}% hekeus@3: \fi}\fi\fi}% hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS hekeus@3: % AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS hekeus@3: % IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001 hekeus@3: % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{% hekeus@3: \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% hekeus@3: % get the labelindentfactor for this level hekeus@3: \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be hekeus@3: \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% hekeus@3: \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default hekeus@3: % set other defaults hekeus@3: \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% hekeus@3: \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% hekeus@3: \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% hekeus@3: \IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent% hekeus@3: % assume normal labelsep hekeus@3: \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% hekeus@3: \partopsep 0ex% hekeus@3: \parsep 0ex% hekeus@3: \itemsep 0ex% hekeus@3: \rightmargin 0em% hekeus@3: \listparindent 0em% hekeus@3: \itemindent 0em% hekeus@3: % Bogus label width in case the user forgets hekeus@3: % to set it. hekeus@3: % TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you hekeus@3: % can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to hekeus@3: % display it on the screen during compilation hekeus@3: % (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out hekeus@3: % which label is the widest) hekeus@3: \settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters hekeus@3: \list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes hekeus@3: % to our globals hekeus@3: \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel hekeus@3: \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters hekeus@3: #1\relax% hekeus@3: % If the user has requested not to use the hekeus@3: % labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent hekeus@3: \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% hekeus@3: \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: % Unless the user has requested otherwise, hekeus@3: % calculate our left margin based hekeus@3: % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and hekeus@3: % \labelsep hekeus@3: \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% hekeus@3: \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax% hekeus@3: \fi}\fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax hekeus@3: \makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax hekeus@3: \makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else hekeus@3: \makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % VERSE and QUOTE hekeus@3: % V1.7 define environments with newenvironment hekeus@3: \newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr hekeus@3: \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent hekeus@3: \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax} hekeus@3: {\endlist} hekeus@3: \newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent hekeus@3: \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax} hekeus@3: {\endlist} hekeus@3: \newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax} hekeus@3: {\endlist} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % \titlepage hekeus@3: % provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct hekeus@3: % way to create the title page. hekeus@3: \newif\if@restonecol hekeus@3: \def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn hekeus@3: \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@} hekeus@3: \def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % standard values from article.cls hekeus@3: \arraycolsep 5pt hekeus@3: \arrayrulewidth .4pt hekeus@3: \doublerulesep 2pt hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \tabcolsep 6pt hekeus@3: \tabbingsep 0.5em hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: %% FOOTNOTES hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: %\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt hekeus@3: % V1.6 respond to changes in font size hekeus@3: % space added above the footnotes (if present) hekeus@3: \skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip plus 0.4\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes hekeus@3: % in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in hekeus@3: % draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep hekeus@3: % determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed hekeus@3: % *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since hekeus@3: % LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7/baselineskip hekeus@3: % above the baseline and 0.3/baselineskip below it, we need to hekeus@3: % use 0.7/baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing hekeus@3: % between all the lines of the footnotes. IEEE often uses a tad hekeus@3: % more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps hekeus@3: % the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran hekeus@3: % uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle. hekeus@3: {\footnotesize hekeus@3: \global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins hekeus@3: \fboxsep = 3pt hekeus@3: \fboxrule = .4pt hekeus@3: % V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark hekeus@3: % Note that IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need hekeus@3: % box resizing tricks here. hekeus@3: \long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em hekeus@3: % V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }} hekeus@3: \long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % IEEE does not use footnote rules hekeus@3: \def\footnoterule{} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 for compsoc, IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot" hekeus@3: % system to implement this. hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule hekeus@3: \@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc hekeus@3: \def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule hekeus@3: \kern-5pt hekeus@3: \hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill} hekeus@3: \kern4.6pt hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \relax hekeus@3: \fi} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages hekeus@3: \interfootnotelinepenalty=10000 hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.6 discourage breaks within equations hekeus@3: % Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000, hekeus@3: % but LaTeX2e normally uses 100. hekeus@3: \interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % default allows section depth up to /paragraph hekeus@3: \setcounter{secnumdepth}{4} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % technotes do not allow /paragraph hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote hekeus@3: \setcounter{secnumdepth}{3} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: % neither do compsoc conferences hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \newcounter{section} hekeus@3: \newcounter{subsection}[section] hekeus@3: \newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection] hekeus@3: \newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection] hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may hekeus@3: % have their own, different, implementations hekeus@3: \newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation] hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents hekeus@3: \def\theequation{\arabic{equation}} % 1 hekeus@3: \def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray) hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc hekeus@3: % compsoc is all arabic hekeus@3: \def\thesection{\arabic{section}} hekeus@3: \def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}} hekeus@3: \def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}} hekeus@3: \def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}} hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \def\thesection{\Roman{section}} % I hekeus@3: % V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around - hekeus@3: \def\thesubsection{\mbox{\thesection-\Alph{subsection}}} % I-A hekeus@3: % V1.7 use I-A1 format used by IEEE rather than I-A.1 hekeus@3: \def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection\arabic{subsubsection}} % I-A1 hekeus@3: \def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection\alph{paragraph}} % I-A1a hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to hekeus@3: % tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks. hekeus@3: % This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but hekeus@3: % it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions. hekeus@3: \@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}% hekeus@3: \g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % Main text forms (how shown in main text headings) hekeus@3: % V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes hekeus@3: % in the former to automatically appear in the latter hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference hekeus@3: \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} hekeus@3: \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis\arabic{subsection}.} hekeus@3: \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.} hekeus@3: \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}.} hekeus@3: \else% compsoc not conferencs hekeus@3: \def\thesectiondis{\thesection} hekeus@3: \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis.\arabic{subsection}} hekeus@3: \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis.\arabic{subsubsection}} hekeus@3: \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis.\arabic{paragraph}} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \else% not compsoc hekeus@3: \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} % I. hekeus@3: \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.} % B. hekeus@3: \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})} % 3) hekeus@3: \def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph})} % d) hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum hekeus@3: \def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1) hekeus@3: % IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray hekeus@3: \def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a) hekeus@3: % redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on hekeus@3: % it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis hekeus@3: \def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does hekeus@3: \def\contentsname{Contents} hekeus@3: \def\listfigurename{List of Figures} hekeus@3: \def\listtablename{List of Tables} hekeus@3: \def\refname{References} hekeus@3: \def\indexname{Index} hekeus@3: \def\figurename{Fig.} hekeus@3: \def\tablename{TABLE} hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}\def\tablename{Table}} hekeus@3: \def\partname{Part} hekeus@3: \def\appendixname{Appendix} hekeus@3: \def\abstractname{Abstract} hekeus@3: % IEEE specific names hekeus@3: \def\IEEEkeywordsname{Index Terms} hekeus@3: \def\IEEEproofname{Proof} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: \def\@pnumwidth{1.55em} hekeus@3: \def\@tocrmarg{2.55em} hekeus@3: \def\@dotsep{4.5} hekeus@3: \setcounter{tocdepth}{3} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily hekeus@3: % collide with the section titles. hekeus@3: % VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders. hekeus@3: % MDS 1/2001 hekeus@3: \def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}} hekeus@3: \def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}% hekeus@3: \@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth% hekeus@3: \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par% hekeus@3: \endgroup} hekeus@3: % argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep hekeus@3: \def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}} hekeus@3: \def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}} hekeus@3: % must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth hekeus@3: % is such as they will not appear in the table of contents hekeus@3: % these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are! hekeus@3: \def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}} hekeus@3: \def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}} hekeus@3: \def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}} hekeus@3: \def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}} hekeus@3: \def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}} hekeus@3: \let\l@table\l@figure hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: %% Definitions for floats hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% Normal Floats hekeus@3: \floatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip hekeus@3: \textfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip hekeus@3: \@fptop 0pt plus 1fil hekeus@3: \@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil hekeus@3: \@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil hekeus@3: \def\topfraction{0.9} hekeus@3: \def\bottomfraction{0.4} hekeus@3: \def\floatpagefraction{0.8} hekeus@3: % V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page hekeus@3: \def\textfraction{0.1} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: %% Double Column Floats hekeus@3: \dblfloatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \dbltextfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip hekeus@3: % Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e. hekeus@3: % There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best hekeus@3: % of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable hekeus@3: % portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and hekeus@3: % do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with hekeus@3: % underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex hekeus@3: % by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998. hekeus@3: % IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't hekeus@3: % protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing. hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil hekeus@3: \@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil hekeus@3: \@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil hekeus@3: \def\dbltopfraction{0.8} hekeus@3: \def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8} hekeus@3: \setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \intextsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip hekeus@3: \setcounter{topnumber}{2} hekeus@3: \setcounter{bottomnumber}{2} hekeus@3: \setcounter{totalnumber}{4} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % article class provides these, we should too. hekeus@3: \newlength\abovecaptionskip hekeus@3: \newlength\belowcaptionskip hekeus@3: % but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table hekeus@3: % captions hekeus@3: \setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.5\baselineskip} hekeus@3: \setlength\belowcaptionskip{0pt} hekeus@3: % V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be hekeus@3: % overridden by a user hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}% hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}% hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments hekeus@3: % as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEtablestring{table} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc hekeus@3: % V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference hekeus@3: \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% hekeus@3: % test if is a for a figure or table hekeus@3: \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% hekeus@3: % if a table, do table caption hekeus@3: \normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}\end{center}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace hekeus@3: % if not a table, format it as a figure hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace hekeus@3: \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}% hekeus@3: \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% hekeus@3: % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around hekeus@3: \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }% hekeus@3: \parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% hekeus@3: % if caption is shorter than a line, center hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% hekeus@3: \fi\fi} hekeus@3: \else% nonconference compsoc hekeus@3: \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% hekeus@3: % test if is a for a figure or table hekeus@3: \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% hekeus@3: % if a table, do table caption hekeus@3: \normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #2}\end{center}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace hekeus@3: % if not a table, format it as a figure hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace hekeus@3: \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}% hekeus@3: \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% hekeus@3: % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around hekeus@3: \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }% hekeus@3: \parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% hekeus@3: % if caption is shorter than a line, left justify hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% hekeus@3: \fi\fi} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption hekeus@3: \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% hekeus@3: % test if is a for a figure or table hekeus@3: \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% hekeus@3: % if a table, do table caption hekeus@3: \footnotesize\begin{center}{\normalfont\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\footnotesize\scshape #2}\end{center}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace hekeus@3: % if not a table, format it as a figure hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace hekeus@3: % 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one hekeus@3: \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ #2}% hekeus@3: \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% hekeus@3: % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around hekeus@3: \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ }% hekeus@3: \parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize\noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% hekeus@3: % if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% hekeus@3: \else \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% hekeus@3: \fi\fi\fi} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label hekeus@3: % within \caption hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff hekeus@3: \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\begin{center}{\footnotesize #1}\end{center}% hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax hekeus@3: \def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}% hekeus@3: \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}% hekeus@3: \let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with hekeus@3: % preview-latex hekeus@3: \newcounter{figure} hekeus@3: \def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure} hekeus@3: \def\fps@figure{tbp} hekeus@3: \def\ftype@figure{1} hekeus@3: \def\ext@figure{lof} hekeus@3: \def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure} hekeus@3: \def\figure{\@float{figure}} hekeus@3: \def\endfigure{\end@float} hekeus@3: \@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}} hekeus@3: \@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat} hekeus@3: \newcounter{table} hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc hekeus@3: \def\thetable{\arabic{table}} hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \def\thetable{\@Roman\c@table} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \def\fps@table{tbp} hekeus@3: \def\ftype@table{2} hekeus@3: \def\ext@table{lot} hekeus@3: \def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable} hekeus@3: % V1.6 IEEE uses 8pt text for tables hekeus@3: % to default to footnotesize, we hack into LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset and pray hekeus@3: \def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}} hekeus@3: \def\endtable{\end@float} hekeus@3: % v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well. hekeus@3: \@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}} hekeus@3: \@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% START OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX hekeus@3: %% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett, hekeus@3: %% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum, hekeus@3: %% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding. hekeus@3: %% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;) hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter hekeus@3: % allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray hekeus@3: % used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both hekeus@3: \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined hekeus@3: \newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % The default math style used by the columns hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle} hekeus@3: % The default text style used by the columns hekeus@3: % default to using the current font hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax} hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber hekeus@3: % a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package hekeus@3: % However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as hekeus@3: % the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else. hekeus@3: \providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue} hekeus@3: \def\IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue} hekeus@3: \def\IEEEnonumber{\global\@eqnswfalse} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \def\IEEEyessubnumber{\global\@IEEEissubequationtrue\global\@eqnswtrue% hekeus@3: \if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% only do something inside an IEEEeqnarray hekeus@3: \if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\addtocounter{equation}{-1}\else\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\fi% hekeus@3: \def\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % flag to indicate that an equation is a sub equation hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEissubequation% hekeus@3: \@IEEEissubequationfalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments hekeus@3: % will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the hekeus@3: % column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text} hekeus@3: \long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}% hekeus@3: % check if column is defined hekeus@3: \relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% hekeus@3: \csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% hekeus@3: \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname% hekeus@3: \else% if not, error and use default type hekeus@3: \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak hekeus@3: Using a default centering column instead}% hekeus@3: {You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% hekeus@3: \csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% hekeus@3: \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it hekeus@3: \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % provides a way to define a letter referenced column type hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text} hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}% hekeus@3: \expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}% hekeus@3: \expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition} hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}% hekeus@3: \expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list hekeus@3: % used to build up the \halign preamble hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}% hekeus@3: \@@IEEEappendtoksA} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument hekeus@3: % uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}% hekeus@3: \edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}% hekeus@3: \@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % define some common column types for the user hekeus@3: % math hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$} hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$} hekeus@3: % text hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % vertical rules hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}% hekeus@3: {\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % horizontal rules hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil} hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % plain hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{} hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types) hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt} hekeus@3: % a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types) hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column hekeus@3: % may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell hekeus@3: % Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way. hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness] hekeus@3: % If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness. hekeus@3: \newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % creates a blank separator row hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands] hekeus@3: % default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] hekeus@3: % blank arguments inherit the default values hekeus@3: % uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}} hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% hekeus@3: % get the skip value, based on the font commands hekeus@3: % use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 hekeus@3: % assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands] hekeus@3: % default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] hekeus@3: % blank arguments inherit the default values hekeus@3: % uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols hekeus@3: % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it hekeus@3: \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% hekeus@3: \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}} hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% hekeus@3: % get the skip value, based on the font commands hekeus@3: % use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 hekeus@3: % assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % draws a single rule across all the columns optional hekeus@3: % argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default hekeus@3: % updates column counter as needed and turns off struts hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness] hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols hekeus@3: % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it hekeus@3: \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% hekeus@3: \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule hekeus@3: % turn off any struts hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then hekeus@3: % another single rule row hekeus@3: % first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default hekeus@3: % second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols hekeus@3: % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it hekeus@3: \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% hekeus@3: \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}% hekeus@3: {\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}} hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% hekeus@3: % we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% hekeus@3: \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]% hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: \\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% hekeus@3: % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it hekeus@3: \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: } hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then hekeus@3: % another single rule row hekeus@3: % first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default hekeus@3: % second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols hekeus@3: % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it hekeus@3: \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% hekeus@3: \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}% hekeus@3: {\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}} hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% hekeus@3: % we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% hekeus@3: \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]% hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: \\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% hekeus@3: % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it hekeus@3: \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: } hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % inserts a full row's worth of &'s hekeus@3: % relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns hekeus@3: % uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax% hekeus@3: \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all hekeus@3: \ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax% hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% hekeus@3: \advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count hekeus@3: \repeat% hekeus@3: \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s hekeus@3: } hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt} % struts within an IEEEeqnarray hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue % is to be used hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % saves the strut height and depth of the master strut hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax% hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% hekeus@3: % remove stretchability hekeus@3: \dimen0\skip0\relax% hekeus@3: \dimen2\skip2\relax% hekeus@3: % save values hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % restores the strut height and depth of the master strut hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax% hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax% hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax% hekeus@3: % remove stretchability hekeus@3: \dimen0\skip0\relax% hekeus@3: \dimen2\skip2\relax% hekeus@3: % restore values hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % globally restores the strut height and depth to the hekeus@3: % master values and sets the master strut flag to true hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax% hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% hekeus@3: % remove stretchability hekeus@3: \dimen0\skip0\relax% hekeus@3: \dimen2\skip2\relax% hekeus@3: % restore values hekeus@3: \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% hekeus@3: \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % if the master strut is not to be used, make the current hekeus@3: % values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth hekeus@3: % and the use master strut flag, global hekeus@3: % this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried hekeus@3: % into the isolation/strut column hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax% hekeus@3: \if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else% hekeus@3: \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}% hekeus@3: \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}% hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% hekeus@3: \fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands] hekeus@3: % If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height hekeus@3: % and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside hekeus@3: % an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut hekeus@3: % only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut hekeus@3: % values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip hekeus@3: % and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively. hekeus@3: % The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under hekeus@3: % a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current hekeus@3: % font is used. hekeus@3: % uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}% hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}% hekeus@3: \skip0=\skip3\relax% hekeus@3: \else% arg one present hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}% hekeus@3: \skip0=\skip3\relax% hekeus@3: \fi% if null arg hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}% hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}% hekeus@3: \skip2=\skip3\relax% hekeus@3: \else% arg two present hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}% hekeus@3: \skip2=\skip3\relax% hekeus@3: \fi% if null arg hekeus@3: % remove stretchability, just to be safe hekeus@3: \dimen0\skip0\relax% hekeus@3: \dimen2\skip2\relax% hekeus@3: % dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth hekeus@3: \if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master hekeus@3: \else% outer, have to set master strut too hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut hekeus@3: \fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands] hekeus@3: % If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height hekeus@3: % and depth to both the master and local struts. hekeus@3: % If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth hekeus@3: % to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use hekeus@3: % of the local strut values. hekeus@3: % In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead. hekeus@3: % The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under hekeus@3: % a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current hekeus@3: % font is used. hekeus@3: % uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}% hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% hekeus@3: \skip0=0pt\relax% hekeus@3: \else% arg one present hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}% hekeus@3: \skip0=\skip3\relax% hekeus@3: \fi% if null arg hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}% hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% hekeus@3: \skip2=0pt\relax% hekeus@3: \else% arg two present hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}% hekeus@3: \skip2=\skip3\relax% hekeus@3: \fi% if null arg hekeus@3: % remove stretchability, just to be safe hekeus@3: \dimen0\skip0\relax% hekeus@3: \dimen2\skip2\relax% hekeus@3: % dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth hekeus@3: \if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size hekeus@3: % get local strut size hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% hekeus@3: % add it to the user supplied values hekeus@3: \advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% hekeus@3: \advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% hekeus@3: % update the local strut size hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master hekeus@3: \else% outer, have to set master strut too hekeus@3: % get master strut size hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% hekeus@3: % add it to the user supplied values hekeus@3: \advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% hekeus@3: \advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% hekeus@3: % update the local and master strut sizes hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut hekeus@3: \fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % allow user a way to see the struts hekeus@3: \newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts hekeus@3: \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values hekeus@3: % uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2 hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax% hekeus@3: \if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut hekeus@3: % get master strut size hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: % get local strut size hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% hekeus@3: \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: % remove stretchability, probably not needed hekeus@3: \dimen0\skip0\relax% hekeus@3: \dimen2\skip2\relax% hekeus@3: % dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth hekeus@3: % allow user to see struts if desired hekeus@3: \ifIEEEvisiblestruts% hekeus@3: \vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: \vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray hekeus@3: % if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide. hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands] hekeus@3: % default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax] hekeus@3: % blank arguments inherit the default values hekeus@3: % uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2 hekeus@3: \def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}} hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}} hekeus@3: \def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax% hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}% hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% hekeus@3: \skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax% hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: \skip0=#1\relax% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}% hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% hekeus@3: \skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax% hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: \skip2=#2\relax% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: % remove stretchability, probably not needed hekeus@3: \dimen0\skip0\relax% hekeus@3: \dimen2\skip2\relax% hekeus@3: \ifIEEEvisiblestruts% hekeus@3: \vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: \vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the hekeus@3: % \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]% hekeus@3: \baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarray} hekeus@3: \def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarray} hekeus@3: \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray. hekeus@3: % The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row. hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}} hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{% hekeus@3: % default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not hekeus@3: % the star form was involked hekeus@3: \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse hekeus@3: \else% not the star form hekeus@3: \global\@eqnswtrue hekeus@3: \fi% if star form hekeus@3: \@IEEEissubequationfalse% default to no subequations hekeus@3: \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse% assume last line is not a sub equation hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise hekeus@3: \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off hekeus@3: % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it hekeus@3: \lineskip=0pt\relax hekeus@3: \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax hekeus@3: \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% hekeus@3: \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax% hekeus@3: \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math hekeus@3: \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses, hekeus@3: % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build hekeus@3: \stepcounter{equation}% advance equation counter before first line hekeus@3: \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet hekeus@3: \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides hekeus@3: #1\relax% allow user to override defaults hekeus@3: \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line hekeus@3: \@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA hekeus@3: % put in the column for the equation number hekeus@3: \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first hekeus@3: \toks0={##}% hekeus@3: % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% hekeus@3: % add the isolation column hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% hekeus@3: % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% hekeus@3: % add the equation number col to the preamble hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}% hekeus@3: % note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col hekeus@3: % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build hekeus@3: \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax hekeus@3: % begin the display alignment hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines hekeus@3: $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup hekeus@3: % "exspand" the preamble hekeus@3: \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use hekeus@3: % every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed, hekeus@3: % restore counters to correct values and exit hekeus@3: \def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup% hekeus@3: \if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi% hekeus@3: \global\advance\c@equation\m@ne% hekeus@3: $$\@ignoretrue} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % need a way to remember if last line is a subequation hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation% hekeus@3: \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to hekeus@3: % end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount] hekeus@3: % This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray hekeus@3: % the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid hekeus@3: % altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column hekeus@3: % as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column hekeus@3: {\ifnum0=`}\fi hekeus@3: \@ifstar{% hekeus@3: \global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR hekeus@3: }{% hekeus@3: \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR hekeus@3: }% hekeus@3: } hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{% hekeus@3: \ifnum0=`{\fi}% hekeus@3: \@@IEEEeqnarraycr hekeus@3: \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}% hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column hekeus@3: \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax hekeus@3: \@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak hekeus@3: environment}% hekeus@3: {Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarry column\MessageBreak hekeus@3: specifications.}\relax% hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all hekeus@3: \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count hekeus@3: \repeat hekeus@3: % this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: % execute the &'s hekeus@3: \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA% hekeus@3: % handle the strut/isolation column hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray hekeus@3: &% and enter the equation number column hekeus@3: % is this line needs an equation number, display it and advance the hekeus@3: % (sub)equation counters, record what type this line was hekeus@3: \if@eqnsw% hekeus@3: \if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\addtocounter{equation}{1}\stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}% hekeus@3: \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationtrue% hekeus@3: \else% display a standard equation number, initialize the IEEEsubequation counter hekeus@3: \theequationdis\stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% hekeus@3: \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse\fi% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: % reset the eqnsw flag to indicate default preference of the display of equation numbers hekeus@3: \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEissubequationfalse% reset the subequation flag hekeus@3: % reset the number of columns the user actually used hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax hekeus@3: % the real end of the line hekeus@3: \cr} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything hekeus@3: % inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second hekeus@3: % optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray, hekeus@3: % equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested. hekeus@3: % \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox hekeus@3: % within an hbox. hekeus@3: % \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within hekeus@3: % a \hbox{$ $} construct. hekeus@3: % \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or hekeus@3: % \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode. hekeus@3: % The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to - hekeus@3: % natural width is the default. hekeus@3: % The * forms do not add \jot line spacing hekeus@3: % usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols} hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} hekeus@3: \def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} hekeus@3: \@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} hekeus@3: \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} hekeus@3: \def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} hekeus@3: \@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} hekeus@3: \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarraybox} hekeus@3: \def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarraybox} hekeus@3: \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $} hekeus@3: % for \vcenter in non-math mode hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW% hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}} hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}} hekeus@3: \def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs hekeus@3: \def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise hekeus@3: \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off hekeus@3: % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it hekeus@3: \lineskip=0pt\relax% hekeus@3: \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% hekeus@3: \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% hekeus@3: \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax% hekeus@3: \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math hekeus@3: % the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue hekeus@3: \@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses, hekeus@3: % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build hekeus@3: \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides hekeus@3: #1\relax% allow user to override defaults hekeus@3: \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing hekeus@3: \@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA hekeus@3: % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col hekeus@3: \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first hekeus@3: \toks0={##}% hekeus@3: % add the isolation column to the preamble hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% hekeus@3: % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build hekeus@3: \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax hekeus@3: % begin the alignment hekeus@3: \everycr{}% hekeus@3: % use only the very first token to determine the positioning hekeus@3: % this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter, hekeus@3: % but is probably not worth the effort hekeus@3: % \noindent is used as a delimiter hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent hekeus@3: % \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded hekeus@3: % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now hekeus@3: \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi% hekeus@3: % use the appropriate vbox type hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax% hekeus@3: \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup% hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines hekeus@3: \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi% hekeus@3: \bgroup hekeus@3: % "exspand" the preamble hekeus@3: \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column, hekeus@3: % exit from math mode if needed, and exit hekeus@3: \def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status hekeus@3: &% enter isolation/strut column hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values hekeus@3: % reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray hekeus@3: % (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values) hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% hekeus@3: % ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox hekeus@3: \crcr\egroup\egroup% hekeus@3: % exit from math mode and close hbox if needed hekeus@3: \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to hekeus@3: % end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount] hekeus@3: % This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray hekeus@3: % For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\ hekeus@3: % the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid hekeus@3: % altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column hekeus@3: % carry strut status into isolation/strut column hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status hekeus@3: &% enter isolation/strut column hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed hekeus@3: % reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% hekeus@3: {\ifnum0=`}\fi% hekeus@3: \@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % test and setup the optional argument to \\[] hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}% hekeus@3: \cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % starts the halign preamble build hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known hekeus@3: % ensure these are valid hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}% hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition hekeus@3: % currently acquired numerically referenced glue hekeus@3: % use a name that is easier to remember hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% hekeus@3: \@IEEEBPcurnum=0% hekeus@3: % tracks number of columns in the preamble hekeus@3: \@IEEEeqnnumcols=0% hekeus@3: % record the default end glues hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}% hekeus@3: % now parse the user's column specifications hekeus@3: \@@IEEEbuildpreamble} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % parses and builds the halign preamble hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble% hekeus@3: % use only the very first token to check the end hekeus@3: % \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else% hekeus@3: % identify current and next token type hekeus@3: \@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid hekeus@3: \@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next hekeus@3: % if curtype is a glue, get the glue def hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi% hekeus@3: % if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi% hekeus@3: % if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi% hekeus@3: % process the acquired glue hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi% hekeus@3: % process the acquired col hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi% hekeus@3: % ready prevtype for next col spec. hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype% hekeus@3: % be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group hekeus@3: \fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % executed just after preamble build is completed hekeus@3: % warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax hekeus@3: \@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}% hekeus@3: {At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}% hekeus@3: \fi%num cols less than 1 hekeus@3: %if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % Identify and return the column specifier's type code hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{% hekeus@3: % use only the very first token to determine the type hekeus@3: % \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent hekeus@3: % \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded hekeus@3: % n = number hekeus@3: % g = glue (any other char in catagory 12) hekeus@3: % c = letter hekeus@3: % e = \end hekeus@3: % u = undefined hekeus@3: % third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char hekeus@3: \let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else hekeus@3: \ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences hekeus@3: \if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else hekeus@3: \if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else hekeus@3: \if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else hekeus@3: \if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else hekeus@3: \if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else hekeus@3: \if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else hekeus@3: \if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else hekeus@3: \if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else hekeus@3: \if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else hekeus@3: \if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else hekeus@3: \ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax hekeus@3: \else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi hekeus@3: \if#2u\relax hekeus@3: \if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}% hekeus@3: {Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak hekeus@3: as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % identify the current letter referenced column hekeus@3: % if invalid, use a default column hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name hekeus@3: \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak hekeus@3: Using a default centering column instead}% hekeus@3: {You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{% hekeus@3: % ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em) hekeus@3: % , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em) hekeus@3: % : = \: (med) 0.22222em ( 4/18 em) hekeus@3: % ; = \; (large) 0.27778em ( 5/18 em) hekeus@3: % ' = \quad 1em hekeus@3: % " = \qquad 2em hekeus@3: % . = 0.5\arraycolsep hekeus@3: % / = \arraycolsep hekeus@3: % ? = 2\arraycolsep hekeus@3: % * = 1fil hekeus@3: % + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter hekeus@3: % - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero hekeus@3: % Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6 hekeus@3: % value for 1em. hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % use only the very first token to determine the type hekeus@3: % this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text hekeus@3: % \noindent is used as a delimiter here hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent hekeus@3: % get the math font 1em value hekeus@3: % LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs hekeus@3: % to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters. hekeus@3: % So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure hekeus@3: % that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done, hekeus@3: % the \textfont2 stuff here may not work. hekeus@3: % Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic. hekeus@3: {\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}% hekeus@3: % fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad). hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax% hekeus@3: % identify the glue value based on the first token hekeus@3: % we discard anything after the first hekeus@3: \if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else hekeus@3: \if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else hekeus@3: \if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else hekeus@3: \if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else hekeus@3: \if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else hekeus@3: \if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else hekeus@3: \if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else hekeus@3: \if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else hekeus@3: \if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else hekeus@3: \if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else hekeus@3: \if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else hekeus@3: \if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else hekeus@3: \edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak hekeus@3: column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak hekeus@3: 0pt instead}% hekeus@3: {Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak hekeus@3: IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % process a numerical digit from the column specification hekeus@3: % and look up the corresponding user defined glue value hekeus@3: % can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g% hekeus@3: \@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak hekeus@3: specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak hekeus@3: after the first}% hekeus@3: {You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak hekeus@3: in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded hekeus@3: \@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax% hekeus@3: \else% if we previously aborted a glue hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion hekeus@3: \else%acquire this number hekeus@3: % save the previous type before the numerical digits started hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi% hekeus@3: \multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax% hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition hekeus@3: \expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}% hekeus@3: \else%user glue not defined hekeus@3: \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak hekeus@3: column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak hekeus@3: 0pt instead}% hekeus@3: {You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak hekeus@3: \string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% hekeus@3: \fi% glue defined or not hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue hekeus@3: \@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition hekeus@3: \fi%close acquisition, get glue hekeus@3: \fi%discard or acquire number hekeus@3: \fi%prevtype glue or not hekeus@3: } hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % process an acquired glue hekeus@3: % add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: % if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else hekeus@3: % as this is not used in the preamble, but before hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}% hekeus@3: \else%not the start glue hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues hekeus@3: \@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak hekeus@3: specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak hekeus@3: after the first}% hekeus@3: {You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak hekeus@3: in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue hekeus@3: \else% not a back to back glue hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble hekeus@3: \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi hekeus@3: \toks0={##}% hekeus@3: % make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this hekeus@3: \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi hekeus@3: % insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand hekeus@3: % the column definition hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% hekeus@3: \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% hekeus@3: \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble hekeus@3: \else% error: non-start glue with no pending column hekeus@3: \@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak hekeus@3: type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak hekeus@3: specifier}% hekeus@3: {Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak hekeus@3: between column types.}% hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue hekeus@3: \fi% previous was a column hekeus@3: \fi% back-to-back glues hekeus@3: \fi% is start column glue hekeus@3: \fi% prev type not a hekeus@3: } hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else hekeus@3: % we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue) hekeus@3: % so we must add this column to the preamble now hekeus@3: \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first hekeus@3: \if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue hekeus@3: \toks0={##}% hekeus@3: % make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this hekeus@3: \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi hekeus@3: % insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand hekeus@3: % the column definition hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% hekeus@3: \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% hekeus@3: \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble hekeus@3: \fi%next type not numeral hekeus@3: \fi%next type not glue hekeus@3: } hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% END OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % set up the running headings, this complex because of all the different hekeus@3: % modes IEEEtran supports hekeus@3: \if@twoside hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote hekeus@3: \def\ps@headings{% hekeus@3: \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage} hekeus@3: \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}} hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot hekeus@3: \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT} hekeus@3: \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{} hekeus@3: \fi} hekeus@3: \else % not a technote hekeus@3: \def\ps@headings{% hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference hekeus@3: \def\@oddhead{} hekeus@3: \def\@evenhead{} hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage} hekeus@3: \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls hekeus@3: \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage} hekeus@3: \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}} hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot hekeus@3: \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT} hekeus@3: \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% hekeus@3: \fi} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \else % single side hekeus@3: \def\ps@headings{% hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference hekeus@3: \def\@oddhead{} hekeus@3: \def\@evenhead{} hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage} hekeus@3: \def\@evenhead{} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls hekeus@3: \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage} hekeus@3: \def\@evenhead{} hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot hekeus@3: \def\@oddfoot{} hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date \hfil DRAFT} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \def\@oddfoot{} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \def\@evenfoot{}} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % title page style hekeus@3: \def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference hekeus@3: \def\@oddhead{}% hekeus@3: \def\@evenhead{}% hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}% hekeus@3: \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls hekeus@3: \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}% hekeus@3: \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}% hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else hekeus@3: \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}% hekeus@3: \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: % all non-draft mode footers hekeus@3: \if@IEEEusingpubid hekeus@3: % for title pages that are using a pubid hekeus@3: % do not repeat pubid if using peer review option hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \footskip 0pt% hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc hekeus@3: \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% hekeus@3: \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% hekeus@3: \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % peer review cover page style hekeus@3: \def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{% hekeus@3: \def\@oddhead{}\def\@evenhead{}% hekeus@3: \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else hekeus@3: \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}% hekeus@3: \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: % non-draft mode footers hekeus@3: \if@IEEEusingpubid hekeus@3: \footskip 0pt% hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc hekeus@3: \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% hekeus@3: \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% hekeus@3: \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % start with empty headings hekeus@3: \def\rightmark{}\def\leftmark{} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: %% Defines the command for putting the header. \footernote{TEXT} is the same hekeus@3: %% as \markboth{TEXT}{TEXT}. hekeus@3: %% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text hekeus@3: %% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually hekeus@3: %% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the hekeus@3: %% arguments to \markboth. hekeus@3: \def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#1}}% hekeus@3: \def\rightmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#2}}} hekeus@3: \def\footernote#1{\markboth{#1}{#1}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \def\today{\ifcase\month\or hekeus@3: January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or hekeus@3: July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi hekeus@3: \space\number\day, \number\year} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: %% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: %% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], [" hekeus@3: \def\@citex[#1]#2{% hekeus@3: \let\@citea\@empty hekeus@3: \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do hekeus@3: {\@citea\def\@citea{], [}% hekeus@3: \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}% hekeus@3: \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi hekeus@3: \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}% hekeus@3: \G@refundefinedtrue hekeus@3: \@latex@warning hekeus@3: {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}% hekeus@3: {\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's hekeus@3: % cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the hekeus@3: % following format controls are already defined and will not hekeus@3: % redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the hekeus@3: % citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" - hekeus@3: % all in IEEE style: [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12] hekeus@3: % This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}. hekeus@3: % If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will hekeus@3: % be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally hekeus@3: % desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in hekeus@3: % that \cite. hekeus@3: % Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments hekeus@3: % to produce the IEEE style. hekeus@3: \def\citepunct{], [} hekeus@3: \def\citedash{]--[} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty hekeus@3: \AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.6 class files should always provide these hekeus@3: \def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em} hekeus@3: \let\@openbib@code\@empty hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later. hekeus@3: % V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in hekeus@3: % order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty: hekeus@3: % \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature} hekeus@3: % \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak} hekeus@3: \def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}} hekeus@3: \def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack hekeus@3: \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{% hekeus@3: \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% hekeus@3: \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}% hekeus@3: \@esphack} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before hekeus@3: % a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance hekeus@3: % the columns on the last page hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0} % the default of zero means that hekeus@3: % the command is not executed hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % allow the user to alter the triggered command hekeus@3: \long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the hekeus@3: % command is executed hekeus@3: \def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}% hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % trigger command at the given reference hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax% hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% hekeus@3: \ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \def\@biblabel#1{[#1]} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % compsoc journals left align the reference numbers hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % controls bib item spacing hekeus@3: \def\IEEEbibitemsep{0pt plus .5pt} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}% hekeus@3: \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}% hekeus@3: % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger hekeus@3: \footnotesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\small}\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip% hekeus@3: \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% hekeus@3: {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}% hekeus@3: \leftmargin\labelwidth hekeus@3: \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax hekeus@3: \itemsep \IEEEbibitemsep\relax hekeus@3: \usecounter{enumiv}% hekeus@3: \let\p@enumiv\@empty hekeus@3: \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% hekeus@3: \let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem% hekeus@3: \def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}% hekeus@3: \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}% hekeus@3: % originally: hekeus@3: % \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000% hekeus@3: % by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more hekeus@3: % difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference. hekeus@3: % IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with hekeus@3: % technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography, hekeus@3: % but the final result will be much more like what IEEE will publish. hekeus@3: % MDS 11/2000 hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100% hekeus@3: \else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi% hekeus@3: \sfcode`\.=1000\relax} hekeus@3: \let\endthebibliography=\endlist hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % TITLE PAGE COMMANDS hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author hekeus@3: % IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font hekeus@3: \def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation. hekeus@3: % When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote hekeus@3: % symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} hekeus@3: % reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you hekeus@3: % cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote hekeus@3: % symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks. hekeus@3: % \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical hekeus@3: % height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that hekeus@3: % the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding hekeus@3: % with the text above. hekeus@3: % V1.7 make this a robust command hekeus@3: \DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or% hekeus@3: \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger% hekeus@3: \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode) hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}} hekeus@3: % The default if the user does not use an author block hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode) hekeus@3: % can be negative hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em} hekeus@3: % compsoc conferences need more space here hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode) hekeus@3: % This can be negative. hekeus@3: % IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these hekeus@3: % controls in place in case they ever change their mind. hekeus@3: % Personally, I like 0.75ex. hekeus@3: %\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex} hekeus@3: %\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex} hekeus@3: % baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode) hekeus@3: % must be positive, spacings below certain values will make hekeus@3: % the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the hekeus@3: % line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders, hekeus@3: % subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep hekeus@3: % these above 2.6ex hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % This tracks the required strut size. hekeus@3: % See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % variables to retain font size and style across groups hekeus@3: % values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10} hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12} hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1} hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm} hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m} hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % saves the current font attributes hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size% hekeus@3: \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip% hekeus@3: \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding% hekeus@3: \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family% hekeus@3: \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series% hekeus@3: \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % restores the saved font attributes hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}% hekeus@3: \fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}% hekeus@3: \fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}% hekeus@3: \fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}% hekeus@3: \fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}% hekeus@3: \selectfont} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace hekeus@3: % we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines hekeus@3: % within the halign environment. hekeus@3: % We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above hekeus@3: % baseline portion at 70% of the total length. hekeus@3: % Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace% hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% hekeus@3: \rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations. hekeus@3: % Makes formatting easy for conferences hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % use real definitions in conference mode hekeus@3: % name block hekeus@3: \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row hekeus@3: % the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs hekeus@3: % for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro hekeus@3: % do a spacer row if needed hekeus@3: \if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column hekeus@3: %restore the correct strut value hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}% hekeus@3: % input the author names hekeus@3: #1% hekeus@3: % end the row if the user did not already hekeus@3: \crcr} hekeus@3: % spacer row for names hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}} hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % affiliation block hekeus@3: \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row hekeus@3: % the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs hekeus@3: % for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro hekeus@3: % do a spacer row if needed hekeus@3: \if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column hekeus@3: %restore the correct strut value hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}% hekeus@3: % input the author affiliations hekeus@3: #1% hekeus@3: % end the row if the user did not already hekeus@3: \crcr} hekeus@3: % spacer row for affiliations hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other hekeus@3: % than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks. hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\else hekeus@3: % not conference or peerreviewca mode hekeus@3: \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}% hekeus@3: \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{#1}% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style hekeus@3: \lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing hekeus@3: \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% hekeus@3: \baselineskip=0pt\relax% hekeus@3: \@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font hekeus@3: \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math hekeus@3: \let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one hekeus@3: \tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing hekeus@3: \everycr{}% ensure no problems here hekeus@3: \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space hekeus@3: \vtop\bgroup%vtop box hekeus@3: \halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax hekeus@3: \hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox hekeus@3: \def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % handle bogus star form hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % test and setup the optional argument to \\[] hekeus@3: \def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % end the line and do the optional spacer hekeus@3: \def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEWARNand hekeus@3: \@IEEEWARNandtrue hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a hekeus@3: % tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid hekeus@3: % outside of conference or peerreviewca modes. hekeus@3: \def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only hekeus@3: when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% hekeus@3: \renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca hekeus@3: \renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % page clearing command hekeus@3: % based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles hekeus@3: % for the inserted blank pages hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else hekeus@3: \hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % user command to invoke the title page hekeus@3: \def\maketitle{\par% hekeus@3: \begingroup% hekeus@3: \normalfont% hekeus@3: \def\thefootnote{}% the \thanks{} mark type is empty hekeus@3: \def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author hekeus@3: \let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well. hekeus@3: \footnotesize% equal spacing between thanks lines hekeus@3: \footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info hekeus@3: % V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}% hekeus@3: \normalsize% hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview hekeus@3: \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% hekeus@3: \thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks% hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \if@twocolumn% hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% hekeus@3: \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \twocolumn[\@maketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace\@IEEEaftertitletext]% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: % pullup page for pubid if used. hekeus@3: \if@IEEEusingpubid hekeus@3: \enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \endgroup hekeus@3: \setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax hekeus@3: \gdef\@thanks{}% hekeus@3: % v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers hekeus@3: % \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}% hekeus@3: \let\thanks\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 parbox to format \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext hekeus@3: \long\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.915\textwidth}{#1}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice hekeus@3: % THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING COMMAND! Do not allow blank lines or unintentional hekeus@3: % spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line hekeus@3: \def\@maketitle{\newpage hekeus@3: \begin{center}% hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes hekeus@3: {\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@author hekeus@3: \@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par hekeus@3: \hfill\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax hekeus@3: \else% not a technote hekeus@3: \vskip0.2em{\Huge\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize\vskip 2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip hekeus@3: \bfseries\Large}\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par% hekeus@3: % V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% hekeus@3: {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% hekeus@3: \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par}\relax hekeus@3: \else% peerreviewca, peerreview or journal hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca hekeus@3: % peerreviewca handles author names just like conference mode hekeus@3: {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% hekeus@3: \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par hekeus@3: {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax hekeus@3: \else% journal or peerreview hekeus@3: {\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par hekeus@3: {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \fi\end{center}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\hspace{7.5pt}% hekeus@3: \raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}% hekeus@3: \hspace{7.5pt}\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def hekeus@3: % We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark hekeus@3: \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks hekeus@3: \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape hekeus@3: \protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}} hekeus@3: \let\@thanks\@empty hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par. hekeus@3: \long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and hekeus@3: % below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}% hekeus@3: \setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}% hekeus@3: \setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc hekeus@3: % V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks hekeus@3: % also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace hekeus@3: \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark hekeus@3: \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks hekeus@3: \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule hekeus@3: {\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax hekeus@3: \protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}} hekeus@3: \DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item} hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: % non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks hekeus@3: \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}} hekeus@3: % redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[] hekeus@3: \DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}% hekeus@3: {\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}} hekeus@3: % be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break hekeus@3: \indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview hekeus@3: \def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}% hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn hekeus@3: \twocolumn[\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace] hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}} hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: % \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected hekeus@3: \def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\begin{center}\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}% hekeus@3: \normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par hekeus@3: \end{center}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.6 hekeus@3: % this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text hekeus@3: % used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column hekeus@3: % of two column text (technotes). hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize hekeus@3: % adjust spacing to next text hekeus@3: % v1.6b handle peer review papers hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview hekeus@3: % for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages hekeus@3: % regardless of the other paper modes hekeus@3: \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference hekeus@3: \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip% hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote hekeus@3: \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip% hekeus@3: \else% journal uses more space hekeus@3: \vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \fi}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.6 hekeus@3: % This is a dynamically determined rigid spacer between the title/authors hekeus@3: % and the main text. This is used only for single column titles over two hekeus@3: % column text (most common) hekeus@3: % This is bit tricky because we have to ensure that the textheight of the hekeus@3: % main text is an integer multiple of \baselineskip hekeus@3: % otherwise underfull vbox problems may develop in the second column of the hekeus@3: % text on the titlepage hekeus@3: % The possible use of \IEEEpubid must also be taken into account. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace{{% hekeus@3: % we run within a group so that all the macros can be forgotten when we are done hekeus@3: \long\def\thanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \thanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height hekeus@3: \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height hekeus@3: \normalfont\normalsize% we declare more descriptive variable names hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%height of the main text columns hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%height of the main text columns with integer # lines hekeus@3: % set the nominal and minimum values for the title spacer hekeus@3: % the dynamic algorithm will not allow the spacer size to hekeus@3: % become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be hekeus@3: % lengthened hekeus@3: % default to journal values hekeus@3: \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}% hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}% hekeus@3: % conferences and technotes need tighter spacing hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%conference hekeus@3: \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}% hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%technote hekeus@3: \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}% hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: % get the height that the title will take up hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview hekeus@3: \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}}% hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@maketitle}}% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \@IEEEmaintextheight=-\@IEEEmaintextheight% title takes away from maintext, so reverse sign hekeus@3: % add the height of the page textheight hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by \textheight% hekeus@3: % correct for title pages using pubid hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else hekeus@3: % peerreview papers use the pubid on the cover page only. hekeus@3: % And the cover page uses a static spacer. hekeus@3: \if@IEEEusingpubid\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEpubidpullup\fi hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: % subtract off the nominal value of the title bottom spacer hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% hekeus@3: % \topskip takes away some too hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\topskip% hekeus@3: % calculate the column height of the main text for lines hekeus@3: % now we calculate the main text height as if holding hekeus@3: % an integer number of \normalsize lines after the first hekeus@3: % and discard any excess fractional remainder hekeus@3: % we subtracted the first line, because the first line hekeus@3: % is placed \topskip into the maintext, not \baselineskip like the hekeus@3: % rest of the lines. hekeus@3: \@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEmaintextheight% hekeus@3: \divide\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip% hekeus@3: \multiply\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip% hekeus@3: % now we calculate how much the title spacer height will hekeus@3: % have to be reduced from nominal (\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight is always hekeus@3: % a positive value) so that the maintext area will contain an integer hekeus@3: % number of normal size lines hekeus@3: % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer hekeus@3: % need \@IEEEINTmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight=\@IEEEINTmaintextheight% hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEmaintextheight% hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by \baselineskip% hekeus@3: % this is the calculated height of the spacer hekeus@3: % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer hekeus@3: % need \@IEEEmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register hekeus@3: \let\@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEEmaintextheight% hekeus@3: \@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% set the nominal value hekeus@3: % we go with the reduced length if it is smaller than an increase hekeus@3: \ifdim\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight < 0.5\baselineskip\relax% hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight% hekeus@3: % if the resulting spacer is too small back out and go with an increase instead hekeus@3: \ifdim\@IEEECOMPENSATElen<\@IEEEMINtitlevspace\relax% hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: % go with an increase because it is closer to the nominal than a decrease hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight% hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: % set the calculated rigid spacer hekeus@3: \vspace{\@IEEECOMPENSATElen}}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.6 hekeus@3: % we allow the user access to the last part of the title area hekeus@3: % useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed hekeus@3: % This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer. hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax hekeus@3: \long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords hekeus@3: % into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for hekeus@3: % in the dynamic sizer. hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext=\relax hekeus@3: \long\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{#1}} hekeus@3: % V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext if hekeus@3: % not in compsoc journal mode - this way abstract and keywords can be placed hekeus@3: % in their conventional position if not in compsoc mode. hekeus@3: \def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{% hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if compsoc conf hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi hekeus@3: \else% or if not compsoc hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current hekeus@3: % baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont hekeus@3: \global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip% hekeus@3: \def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % abstract and keywords are in \small, except hekeus@3: % for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize hekeus@3: % Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small hekeus@3: % becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small} hekeus@3: \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}} hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\normalsize}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines hekeus@3: % so that spacing is more tightly controlled. hekeus@3: \def\abstract{\normalfont hekeus@3: \if@twocolumn hekeus@3: \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\abstractname}---\relax hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize hekeus@3: \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} hekeus@3: % V1.6 IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in hekeus@3: % conference mode (the heading already has this much above it) hekeus@3: \def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{0ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi hekeus@3: \normalfont\normalsize} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont hekeus@3: \if@twocolumn hekeus@3: \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize hekeus@3: \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} hekeus@3: \def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{0.67ex}\fi hekeus@3: \par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi% hekeus@3: \normalfont\normalsize} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference hekeus@3: \def\abstract{\normalfont hekeus@3: \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\abstractname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip hekeus@3: \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize% hekeus@3: \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} hekeus@3: \def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\vskip 1.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip hekeus@3: \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip hekeus@3: \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize% hekeus@3: \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} hekeus@3: \else% compsoc not conference hekeus@3: \def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily hekeus@3: \if@twocolumn hekeus@3: \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% hekeus@3: \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} hekeus@3: \def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily hekeus@3: \if@twocolumn hekeus@3: \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent hekeus@3: \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% hekeus@3: \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that hekeus@3: % is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input hekeus@3: % so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not hekeus@3: % affect the formatting of the text hekeus@3: \long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0% hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1% hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par% hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\% hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ % hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }% hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken% hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken% hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken% hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: % a control space will come in as a macro hekeus@3: % when it is the last one on a line hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO% hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: % if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one hekeus@3: % else spit it out and stop gobbling hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else% hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi% hekeus@3: \@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}% hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % TITLING OF SECTIONS hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,} % Punctuation after run-in section heading (headings which are hekeus@3: % part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space hekeus@3: % spacing from section number to title hekeus@3: % compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ } hekeus@3: \fi\fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 0.5em\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc hekeus@3: % compsoc journals need extra spacing hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else hekeus@3: \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax} hekeus@3: \fi\fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: %v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control hekeus@3: %and use \@@par rather than \par hekeus@3: \def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% hekeus@3: \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth hekeus@3: \let\@svsec\@empty hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \refstepcounter{#1}% hekeus@3: % load section label and spacer into \@svsec hekeus@3: \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: \@tempskipa #5\relax hekeus@3: \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high hekeus@3: \begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading hekeus@3: \noindent % subsections are NOT indented hekeus@3: % print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title hekeus@3: % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal hekeus@3: {\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}}% hekeus@3: \endgroup hekeus@3: \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else hekeus@3: \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}% hekeus@3: \else % printout low level headings hekeus@3: % svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{} hekeus@3: % got rid of sectionmark stuff hekeus@3: \def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec #8\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}% hekeus@3: \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else hekeus@3: \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}% hekeus@3: \fi%skip down hekeus@3: \@xsect{#5}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % section* handler hekeus@3: %v1.7 put {} after #4 to allow for some types of user font control hekeus@3: %and use \@@par rather than \par hekeus@3: \def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax hekeus@3: \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ hekeus@3: %\begingroup #4\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup hekeus@3: % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal hekeus@3: \begingroup \noindent #4{\relax{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}}\endgroup hekeus@3: % svsechd swallows the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{} hekeus@3: \else \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}}\fi hekeus@3: \@xsect{#3}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: %% SECTION heading spacing and font hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: % arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name hekeus@3: % (for \@sect) #2 - section level hekeus@3: % #3 - section heading indent hekeus@3: % #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text) hekeus@3: % If negative, make stretch parts negative too! hekeus@3: % #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading, hekeus@3: % negative: amount to indent main text after heading hekeus@3: % Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation hekeus@3: % #6 - font control hekeus@3: % You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent hekeus@3: % trouble when you do something like: hekeus@3: % \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ... hekeus@3: % IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section hekeus@3: % heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good hekeus@3: % idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber. hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% hekeus@3: % IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode samer@56: \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-1.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -0.5ex}% hekeus@3: {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}% samer@56: \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-1.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -0.5ex}% hekeus@3: {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% hekeus@3: \else % for journals hekeus@3: \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{3.0ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% V1.6 3.0ex from 3.5ex hekeus@3: {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}% hekeus@3: \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% hekeus@3: {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % for both journals and conferences hekeus@3: % decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody hekeus@3: \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% hekeus@3: {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% hekeus@3: \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% hekeus@3: {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % compsoc hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference hekeus@3: % compsoc conference hekeus@3: \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% hekeus@3: {1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}% hekeus@3: \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% hekeus@3: {1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}% hekeus@3: \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% hekeus@3: {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}% hekeus@3: \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% hekeus@3: {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% hekeus@3: \else% compsoc journals hekeus@3: % use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles hekeus@3: \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}% hekeus@3: {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}% hekeus@3: % Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society, hekeus@3: % I have to look up an example. hekeus@3: \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}% hekeus@3: {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}% hekeus@3: \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}% hekeus@3: {0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}% hekeus@3: \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}% hekeus@3: {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% hekeus@3: \fi\fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: %% ENVIRONMENTS hekeus@3: % "box" symbols at end of proofs hekeus@3: \def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box hekeus@3: % V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one hekeus@3: \def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}} hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc hekeus@3: \def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen} % default to open for compsoc hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support hekeus@3: % for an optional argument. hekeus@3: \def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\par\noindent\hspace{2em}{\itshape #1: }} hekeus@3: \def\endIEEEproof{\hspace*{\fill}~\IEEEQED\par} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: %\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable hekeus@3: \newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent hekeus@3: \def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist% hekeus@3: \item[\hskip \labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2:}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent} hekeus@3: \def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily \trivlist% hekeus@3: % V1.6 IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics hekeus@3: % Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this. hekeus@3: \item[\hskip\labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2\ (#3):}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent} hekeus@3: % V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with hekeus@3: % lines below. hekeus@3: \def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.6 hekeus@3: % display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection hekeus@3: % is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic. hekeus@3: % LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number hekeus@3: % (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator. hekeus@3: % V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection hekeus@3: % to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed. hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}} hekeus@3: % string macro hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEstringsection{section} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection hekeus@3: % if section in_counter is used hekeus@3: \def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{% hekeus@3: \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname hekeus@3: {\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]% hekeus@3: \edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3} hekeus@3: \ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection hekeus@3: \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% hekeus@3: \noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep hekeus@3: \@thmcounter{#1}}% hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% hekeus@3: \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep hekeus@3: \@thmcounter{#1}}% hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}% hekeus@3: \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: %% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE hekeus@3: \ps@headings hekeus@3: \pagenumbering{arabic} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % normally the page counter starts at 1 hekeus@3: \setcounter{page}{1} hekeus@3: % however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1 hekeus@3: % (for duplex printing) hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview hekeus@3: \if@twoside hekeus@3: \setcounter{page}{-1} hekeus@3: \else hekeus@3: \setcounter{page}{0} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as hekeus@3: % needed when single sided hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi hekeus@3: % if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and hekeus@3: % enforce a rigid position for the last lines hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn hekeus@3: % the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else hekeus@3: \twocolumn hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: \sloppy hekeus@3: \flushbottom hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package hekeus@3: % by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau hekeus@3: % \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command hekeus@3: % is present or not. hekeus@3: % For instance: hekeus@3: % \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}} hekeus@3: % \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if hekeus@3: % \appendices is invoked. hekeus@3: % The command \section will behave slightly differently depending hekeus@3: % on whether the user specifies a title: hekeus@3: % \section{My appendix title} hekeus@3: % or not: hekeus@3: % \section{} hekeus@3: % This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title hekeus@3: % would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of hekeus@3: % contents hekeus@3: \begingroup hekeus@3: \catcode`\Q=3 hekeus@3: \long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil} hekeus@3: \long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4} hekeus@3: \endgroup hekeus@3: % end of \@ifmtarg defs hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 hekeus@3: % command that allows the one time saving of the original definition hekeus@3: % of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices hekeus@3: % we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other hekeus@3: % packages (hyperref.sty, etc.) hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument} hekeus@3: % we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no hekeus@3: % argument (title) hekeus@3: % note we reroute the call to the old \section* hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{% hekeus@3: \@ifmtarg{#1}{% hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis}% hekeus@3: \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection}}{% hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis \\* #1}% hekeus@3: \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection: #1}}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % we use this if the user calls \section{} after hekeus@3: % \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the hekeus@3: % command and its argument. Then, warn the user. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless hekeus@3: \protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls hekeus@3: % and in the Table of Contents. hekeus@3: % The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % appendix command for one single appendix hekeus@3: % normally has no heading. However, if you want a hekeus@3: % heading, you can do so via the optional argument: hekeus@3: % \appendix[Optional Heading] hekeus@3: \def\appendix{\relax} hekeus@3: \renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par hekeus@3: % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique hekeus@3: \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}% hekeus@3: % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section hekeus@3: \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% hekeus@3: \setcounter{section}{0}% hekeus@3: \setcounter{subsection}{0}% hekeus@3: \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% hekeus@3: \setcounter{paragraph}{0}% hekeus@3: \gdef\thesection{A}% hekeus@3: \gdef\thesectiondis{}% hekeus@3: \gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}% hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A} hekeus@3: \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter hekeus@3: \@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}% hekeus@3: \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{% hekeus@3: \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\\* #1}% hekeus@3: \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}% hekeus@3: % redefine \section command for appendix hekeus@3: % leave \section* as is hekeus@3: \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% hekeus@3: \@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument hekeus@3: % of the normal form hekeus@3: } hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % appendices command for multiple appendices hekeus@3: % user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to hekeus@3: % declare the individual appendices hekeus@3: \def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par hekeus@3: % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique hekeus@3: \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}% hekeus@3: % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section hekeus@3: \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% hekeus@3: \setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0 hekeus@3: \setcounter{subsection}{0}% hekeus@3: \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% hekeus@3: \setcounter{paragraph}{0}% hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices% hekeus@3: \gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}% hekeus@3: \gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}% hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}} hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: \gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}% hekeus@3: \gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}% hekeus@3: \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}} hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter hekeus@3: \setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix hekeus@3: % redefine \section command for appendices hekeus@3: % leave \section* as is hekeus@3: \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form hekeus@3: \refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so, hekeus@3: \@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument hekeus@3: % of the normal form hekeus@3: } hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % \IEEEPARstart hekeus@3: % Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the hekeus@3: % first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter hekeus@3: % of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the hekeus@3: % first word which will be rendered in upper case. hekeus@3: % In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to: hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment hekeus@3: % within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart. hekeus@3: % 2. auto-detect and use the current font family hekeus@3: % 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that hekeus@3: % interword glue will now work as normal. hekeus@3: % 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines. hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too. hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users hekeus@3: % to change the font style. hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % the number of lines that are indented to clear it hekeus@3: % may need to increase if using decenders hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES{2} hekeus@3: % minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart hekeus@3: % Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to hekeus@3: % be overly cautious hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES{2} hekeus@3: % V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text hekeus@3: % in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called). hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT{T} hekeus@3: % the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline hekeus@3: % the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum hekeus@3: % of this value and the height of the \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current hekeus@3: % font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip hekeus@3: % so that it can respond to changes therein. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH{1.1\baselineskip} hekeus@3: % V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in, hekeus@3: % can take zero or one argument. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\bfseries} hekeus@3: % V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify hekeus@3: % the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase} hekeus@3: % V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word, hekeus@3: % can take zero or one argument. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\relax} hekeus@3: % V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify hekeus@3: % the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase} hekeus@3: % This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text. hekeus@3: % Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced hekeus@3: % to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartSEP{0.15em} hekeus@3: % V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET{0em} hekeus@3: % V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT{\/} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape} hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % definition of \IEEEPARstart hekeus@3: % THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use hekeus@3: % of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter hekeus@3: % The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second hekeus@3: % argument is the rest of the first word(s). hekeus@3: \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{% hekeus@3: % if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start hekeus@3: % on a new one hekeus@3: \@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}% hekeus@3: % V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE hekeus@3: % which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued hekeus@3: \noindent hekeus@3: % calculate the desired height of the big letter hekeus@3: % it extends from the top of \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font hekeus@3: % down to \@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline hekeus@3: \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}% hekeus@3: \addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}% hekeus@3: % extract the name of the current font in bold hekeus@3: % and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}% hekeus@3: {\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}% hekeus@3: \xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}% hekeus@3: % define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired hekeus@3: % height of the drop letter hekeus@3: \font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax% hekeus@3: % save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points) hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% hekeus@3: % now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size hekeus@3: \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}% hekeus@3: % If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the hekeus@3: % current font is strange, do not allow a zero height. hekeus@3: \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax% hekeus@3: \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}% hekeus@3: \typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: % and store it as a counter hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% hekeus@3: % Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital hekeus@3: % letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB, hekeus@3: % will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA hekeus@3: % we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA hekeus@3: % by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB hekeus@3: % But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer hekeus@3: % division. Hence the use of the counters. hekeus@3: % We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will hekeus@3: % have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result hekeus@3: \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200% hekeus@3: \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB% hekeus@3: % Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by hekeus@3: % floating point values hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% hekeus@3: \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% hekeus@3: % \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter hekeus@3: % We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the hekeus@3: % big letter. hekeus@3: \global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% hekeus@3: % Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter hekeus@3: % We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the hekeus@3: % hanging indent hekeus@3: \settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont hekeus@3: \@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}% hekeus@3: % end of the isolated calculation environment hekeus@3: % add in the extra clearance we want hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartSEP\relax% hekeus@3: % add in the optional offset hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax% hekeus@3: % V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA hekeus@3: \ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi hekeus@3: % \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the hekeus@3: % separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use hekeus@3: % Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command hekeus@3: % The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other hekeus@3: % text won't be displaced by it. hekeus@3: \hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES% hekeus@3: \makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% hekeus@3: \raisebox{-\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}% hekeus@3: \@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}% hekeus@3: \hspace{\@IEEEPARstartSEP}}}% hekeus@3: {\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater hekeus@3: % than the specified space of argument one hekeus@3: % if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero) hekeus@3: % and issue a \newpage hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill} hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to hekeus@3: % be overly cautious hekeus@3: % Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau hekeus@3: % Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations, hekeus@3: % so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine hekeus@3: % if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left hekeus@3: \ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left hekeus@3: \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi% hekeus@3: \newpage% hekeus@3: \fi\endgroup} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT hekeus@3: % Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size) hekeus@3: % As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic! hekeus@3: % V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a hekeus@3: % biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo. hekeus@3: % MDS 7/2001 hekeus@3: % V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies hekeus@3: % and not just the previous section hekeus@3: \newcounter{IEEEbiography} hekeus@3: \setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % photo area size hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in} % width of the biography photo area hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in} % depth (height) of the biography photo area hekeus@3: % area cleared for photo hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in} % width cleared for the biography photo area hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in} % depth cleared for the biography photo area hekeus@3: % actual depth will be a multiple of hekeus@3: % \baselineskip, rounded up hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEBIOskipN{4\baselineskip}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize% hekeus@3: \unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500% hekeus@3: % we need enough space to support the hanging indent hekeus@3: % the nominal value of the spacer hekeus@3: % and one extra line for good measure hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN% hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip% hekeus@3: % if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start hekeus@3: % with a new one hekeus@3: \@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}% hekeus@3: % nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill hekeus@3: \vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% hekeus@3: % the default box for where the photo goes hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{% hekeus@3: \begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}% hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the hekeus@3: % \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above hekeus@3: % and if so, override the default box with what they want hekeus@3: \@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}% hekeus@3: \centering% hekeus@3: #1% hekeus@3: \end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied hekeus@3: % Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before hekeus@3: \if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade% hekeus@3: % link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump hekeus@3: % to the biography, not the previous section hekeus@3: \setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}% hekeus@3: \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% hekeus@3: \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: % one more biography hekeus@3: \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% hekeus@3: % Make an entry for this name into the table of contents hekeus@3: \addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}% hekeus@3: % V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the hekeus@3: % hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so hekeus@3: % that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the hekeus@3: % user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces. hekeus@3: \let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command hekeus@3: \edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par hekeus@3: \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth hekeus@3: \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip% calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate hekeus@3: % set the hanging indent hekeus@3: \hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth% hekeus@3: \hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% hekeus@3: % reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T hekeus@3: \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}% hekeus@3: % set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything hekeus@3: \noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{% hekeus@3: \raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}% hekeus@3: % now place the author name and begin the bio text hekeus@3: \noindent\textbf{#2\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par% hekeus@3: % 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area hekeus@3: % and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry hekeus@3: % MDS hekeus@3: \ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad hekeus@3: \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line hekeus@3: \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding hekeus@3: \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% hekeus@3: \noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: \par\normalfont} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.6 hekeus@3: % added biography without a photo environment hekeus@3: \newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{% hekeus@3: % Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before hekeus@3: \if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade% hekeus@3: % link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump hekeus@3: % to the biography, not the previous section hekeus@3: \setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}% hekeus@3: \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% hekeus@3: \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% hekeus@3: \fi% hekeus@3: % one more biography hekeus@3: \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% hekeus@3: % Make an entry for this name into the table of contents hekeus@3: \addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}% hekeus@3: \normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500% hekeus@3: \vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% hekeus@3: \parskip=0pt\par% hekeus@3: \noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % provide the user with some old font commands hekeus@3: % got this from article.cls hekeus@3: \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm} hekeus@3: \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf} hekeus@3: \DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt} hekeus@3: \DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf} hekeus@3: \DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit} hekeus@3: \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl} hekeus@3: \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc} hekeus@3: \DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal} hekeus@3: \DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % holds the special notice text hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do: hekeus@3: % \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle hekeus@3: \def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\sublargesize\textit{#1}\vspace*{1em}}}% hekeus@3: \else% hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\\*[1.5ex]\sublargesize\textit{#1}}\vspace*{-2ex}}% hekeus@3: \fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS hekeus@3: % to insert a publisher's ID footer hekeus@3: % V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style hekeus@3: % occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle hekeus@3: % use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page hekeus@3: % These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into hekeus@3: % consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author hekeus@3: % names and the maintext. hekeus@3: % hekeus@3: % the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the hekeus@3: % publisher's ID footer hekeus@3: % IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals, hekeus@3: % dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip} hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote hekeus@3: % for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no hekeus@3: % dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the hekeus@3: % in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the hekeus@3: % second column hekeus@3: % There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on hekeus@3: % Information Theory") in which IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for hekeus@3: % technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip hekeus@3: % and call it even. hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % holds the ID text hekeus@3: \def\@IEEEpubid{\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEusingpubid hekeus@3: \global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse hekeus@3: % issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom hekeus@3: % V1.6 use before \maketitle hekeus@3: \def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in hekeus@3: % to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of hekeus@3: % the title page when using \IEEEpubid hekeus@3: % Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or hekeus@3: % if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid hekeus@3: % currently needed in for the second column of a page with the hekeus@3: % publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this hekeus@3: % command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility hekeus@3: % v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been hekeus@3: % selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page. hekeus@3: % V1.7 do nothing if compsoc hekeus@3: \def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else hekeus@3: \if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other hekeus@3: % gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to hekeus@3: % implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX. hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: %% Lockout some commands under various conditions hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % general purpose bit bucket hekeus@3: \newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % flags to prevent multiple warning messages hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership hekeus@3: \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext hekeus@3: \@IEEEWARNthankstrue hekeus@3: \@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue hekeus@3: \@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue hekeus@3: \@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue hekeus@3: \@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue hekeus@3: \@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue hekeus@3: \@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue hekeus@3: \@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: %% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed hekeus@3: %% hekeus@3: % save commands which might be locked out hekeus@3: % so that the user can later restore them if needed hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership hekeus@3: \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode hekeus@3: % This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter hekeus@3: % algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch hekeus@3: % At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft hekeus@3: % paper. hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls hekeus@3: \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart hekeus@3: is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: % and for technotes hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote hekeus@3: \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart hekeus@3: is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode hekeus@3: \ifCLASSOPTIONconference hekeus@3: % when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid, hekeus@3: % \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text. hekeus@3: % \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead hekeus@3: % warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen hekeus@3: % from filling up with redundant messages hekeus@3: \def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks hekeus@3: is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse} hekeus@3: \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart hekeus@3: is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently. hekeus@3: % the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname hekeus@3: % (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname ) hekeus@3: % the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine hekeus@3: % whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the hekeus@3: % default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command hekeus@3: % we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX hekeus@3: % ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break. hekeus@3: % Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal hekeus@3: % name can be left undisturbed. hekeus@3: \newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography hekeus@3: is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse% hekeus@3: \setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} hekeus@3: % and make biography point to our bogus biography hekeus@3: \let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography hekeus@3: \let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto hekeus@3: is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse% hekeus@3: \setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid hekeus@3: is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse} hekeus@3: \def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol hekeus@3: is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse} hekeus@3: \def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership hekeus@3: is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse} hekeus@3: \def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext hekeus@3: is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse} hekeus@3: \fi hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out hekeus@3: \def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{% hekeus@3: \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}% hekeus@3: \let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks% hekeus@3: \let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart% hekeus@3: \let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography% hekeus@3: \let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography% hekeus@3: \let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto% hekeus@3: \let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto% hekeus@3: \let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid% hekeus@3: \let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol% hekeus@3: \let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership% hekeus@3: \let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % need a backslash character for typeout output hekeus@3: {\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12 hekeus@3: |xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings hekeus@3: \def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno). hekeus@3: Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % provide for legacy commands hekeus@3: \def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA} hekeus@3: \def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN} hekeus@3: \def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark} hekeus@3: \def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart} hekeus@3: \def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid} hekeus@3: \def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol} hekeus@3: \def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED} hekeus@3: \def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed} hekeus@3: \def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen} hekeus@3: \def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % provide for legacy environments hekeus@3: \def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography} hekeus@3: \def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto} hekeus@3: \def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords} hekeus@3: \def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography} hekeus@3: \def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto} hekeus@3: \def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % provide for legacy IED commands/lengths when possible hekeus@3: \let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent hekeus@3: \def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin} hekeus@3: \def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth} hekeus@3: \def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep} hekeus@3: \def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc} hekeus@3: \def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl} hekeus@3: \def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % let \proof use the IEEEtran version even after amsthm is loaded hekeus@3: % \proof is now deprecated in favor of \IEEEproof hekeus@3: \AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: % V1.7 \overrideIEEEmargins is no longer supported. hekeus@3: \def\overrideIEEEmargins{% hekeus@3: \typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}% hekeus@3: \typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}} hekeus@3: hekeus@3: hekeus@3: \endinput hekeus@3: hekeus@3: %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtran.cls %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% hekeus@3: % That's all folks! hekeus@3: